Home

Manual

Contents

1. e sa 248 Towing Tipse enea et be eed 257 E Trailer Towing 249 Mi Recreational Towing Common Towing Definitions 249 Berne Motor KOS PE 299 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Trailer Hitch Classification 251 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Trailer Towing Weights Ground Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 251 Trailer And Tongue Weight 253 196 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 s
2. 249 Quality Grading 349 Cooling System Tips 258 Radial ex 229 Hitches 2 rug Bad LE x 251 Replacement 232 Minimum Requirements 254 EE Ku equ mew ed 240 Trailer and Tongue Weight 253 Safety vio reed oss 218 226 WI e hes cedro ie eh etg canet 256 Self Sealing css Re eee 234 Trailer Towing Guide 251 SIZES ud vows T RE 219 Trailer Weight eese sew ae eee ees 251 Snow Tires uar exa Rana ea RS 239 lransimission 5 2 1222 m amet Rx 306 Spare Tire us S sq ahd gb kd Pane we aAA 265 Automatic 198 203 306 Spinnitg APRES 230 Elit v Du sd Stu ER 325 Tread Wear Indicators 231 Shifting 252 eg e rv ga RR ES 198 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 253 Transmitter Battery Service Torque Converter Clutch 201 Remote Keyless Entry 24 TOWING du etn ee Ve VUA 249 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 115 Behind a Motor Home 259 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry 21 Disabled Vehicle 274 Transporting Pets 58 251 Tread Wear Indicators 231 364 INDEX Se Trip Odometer Reset Button 135 Trunk
3. 344 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 344 Quality 349 If You Need Assistance 344 Treadwear Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 346 Traction Grades Parts 346 Temperature Grades 344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
4. 12 Service Assistance 344 Service Contract 346 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 141 Service Manuals 347 Setting the Clock Settings Personal Shift Speeds en is as date Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 35 Side Airbag zac sed Ga RA 46 Signals Turn 136 362 INDEX M Slippery Surfaces Driving 272 Snow Chains Tire Chains 238 SHOW TIES ord dE REIS 239 oM Mes dM Ue 229 230 265 Spark Plugs 4 eri AER RES rA 290 Speed Control Cruise Control 111 Speedometer gx dede e ed aves 135 LATE Loss ue 196 Engine Fails to Start 197 Starting and Operating 196 Steering TA KAS ER ie te xe 296 POWE iet c okt o e dts a essen Eds 217 295 Til Columm 222222222 Rx ars 106 Wheel 106 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls cose mer ates eue a d ese 178 SEOtaBe a5 Ga ase ero abu A 127 317 Storage Vehicle 190 317 Storing Your Vehicle 317 ROOF IS See 120 Sunglasses Storage 114 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 38 System Navigation
5. Outside MER eee 68 Recommendation Rearview ecs d x yes ve ee eI s ax 67 Synthetic ccce eer EE RE PES axis utto store waste Ken ueniat ende sed eas 69 VISCOSID dro ceste aea Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Onboard Diagnostic System Monitor Tire Pressure System 234 Opener Garage Door HomeLink Mopar Parts ev e e 284 346 Operator Manual Owner s Manual Multi Displacement Engine System 218 Overhead Console Multi Function Control Lever 100 Overheating Engine Owner s Manual Operator Manual Navigation System 177 New Vehicle Break In Period 59 Panic Alarm caesus ge ae 23 Parking Brake 212 360 INDEX Parking On 213 Passing Light s s sen cess yu Re eva s 103 Pedals Adjustable 95 Personal Settings 150 Pets Su eee nU Potter ee 58 Phone Cellular 70 Phone Hands Free UConnect 70 Placard Tire and Loading Information 222 Power Brakes ett tet wu 214 Distribution Center 311 Door Locks deris eee sp RR YS 16 Mirrors xem vehat ERR ME a 69 Outlet
6. Rear Seat Cup Holders 126 dai de de cane qt iet ons 127 Console 127 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 127 Load Leveling System If Equipped 128 NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped If the switch is in the AUTO position the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you The mirror will normally be in the AUTO mode unless OFF is pressed on the switch at the base of the mirror A green light in the base of the mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Ny NIGHT ES B Z 80975a32 Adjusting Rearview Mirror 81074fc3 Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror 68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver s Side Outside M
7. 297 WM Replacement Light Bulbs 317 Cooling System 298 W Bulb 318 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 303 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight tape gt UT Brake Fluid Level Check 304 1 Backup Light Side Marker Light Tail Turn Fuel System Hoses 305 Light And Tail Stop Light 320 Automatic Transmission 306 License Light 322 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 307 W Fluids And 323 Appearance Care And Protection From Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 324 Corrosion 307 COSE MS NUEVE ERO 324 Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders 310 e TECHN 325 Bl Power Distribution 5 311 NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279 2 7L ENGINE POWER oe CHEE Gil ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR COOLANT DISTRIBUTION CENTER ANSMISSION FLUID CHECK ACCESS COVER BOTTLE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE COOLANT AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING BOTTLE POSITIVE BATTERY POST OIL FILL PRESSURE FILTER FLUID CHECK 8127c8d3 2 7L Engine Compartment 280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe 3 5L ENGINE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID FILL BRAKE FLUID COOLANT RESERVOIR PRESSURE ACCESS COVER CAP POWER DISTRIBUTION CE
8. o ees os ooh is SERE 197 Fuel Requirements 241 323 i Beet me Ven 285 323 324 Oil Change Interval 287 Oil Selection 287 323 Oil Synthetic se oec Cee een 289 Overheating Temperature Gauge 135 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 49 Event Data Recorder 50 Exhaust Gas Caution 59 244 298 Exhaust System 297 Exterior Folding Mirrors 68 Filters Air Cleaner ERN ha ee ets 290 Air Conditioning 190 295 Engine Fuel ui faseer tapoia ees 291 Engine soisessa e aine 290 324 Engine Oil Disposal 289 Flashers Hazard Warning 262 Turn Signal SEES Flash To Pass Flat Tire Changing Floor Console si 00034 ma Re RR s Fluid Capacities Fluid Leaks Fluid Level Checks Brake 356 INDEX Cooling System 299 Engine Oll ale rw 285 286 Power Steering 295 edm as Re tice SO dN ardet 324 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 324 Fog Lights 103 138 Folding Rear Seat 94 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
9. Loss a EL a 103 Switch 4 o Vea uox ey ge ds 99 100 Time Delay ii eve e d 102 Heated Seats fbi rA EIAS 92 Heater Engine Block 198 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 103 Hitches Trailer Towing Holder Cup oc ieee ERI 125 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 115 Hood Release 96 43 E rhe tege 12 Hoses c ved Amat cS suus 303 305 Ignition I ey 52 sibi Rue echte 11 Illuminated Entry 15 Immobilizer Sentry Key 12 Infant Restraint 52 Information Center Vehicle 142 Instrument Cluster 134 135 Instrument Panel and Controls 132 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 310 Interior Appearance Care 309 Interior Fuses 311 Interior Lights 98 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 105 Introduction 4 Jack Location 265 Jack Operation Lue en 266 Jacking Instructions 266 Jump Starting 270 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 12 Key In Reminder 12 Keyless
10. 280 E 57L Engine ERSTER 281 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD 282 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs bed x ees 283 Bl Replacement Parts 284 Dealer Service 284 Bi Maintenance Procedures 285 Engine Oll oes at eh t eb Rd 285 Engine Oil Filter 290 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tensioner zcecueg4cwee eg Geese ee 290 Spark Plugs 4 venen 290 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 290 Fuel Filter ule Ale Catalytic Converter Maintenance Free Battery 292 Air Conditioner Maintenance 294 A C Air Filter If Equipped 295 Power Steering Fluid 295 Front amp Rear Suspension BallJoints 296 Steering Linkage 296 278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Body Lubrication 296 Front Power Distribution Center 311 Windshield Wiper Blades 296 Rear Power Distribution Center 313 Windshield Washers 297 317 Exhaust System
11. 15 B Illuminated Entry System 15 Door Locks 16 Manual Door 16 Power Door Locks 16 Child Protection Door Lock 20 Remote Keyless 21 To Unlock The Doors 21 To Lock The Doors 22 To Unlatch The Trunk 23 Using The Panic Alarm 23 General Information 24 Transmitter Battery Service 24 Bi Vehicle Theft Alarm 25 Trunk Lock And Release 27 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Trunk Safety 27 Trunk Emergency Release 28 Windows 28 Power Windows 28 Bl Occupant Restraints 31 Lap Shoulder Belts 32 Seat Belt 36 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert 542 A ue 36 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 37 Seat Belt 37 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 38 Bl Engine Break In Re
12. Headlight Switch NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the headlight switch counter clockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Headlight Switch 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature This feature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If equipped Refer to Headlights On With Wipers in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on the headlights are off and the parking brake is off
13. percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Towing Requirements Tires Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 256 STARTING AND OPERATING electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an acc
14. 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction C the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com COM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows To put into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition switch Then press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds Then
15. 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD sys tem is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was 284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMEN
16. Ut oq edades dd Erasing HomeLink Buttons 119 Synchronizing ESP 111 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 119 Electronic Speed 1 11 gts Sans 120 GO Activate s tu uot M Ak Aa oh 112 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 120 Set At A Desired Speed 112 Opening Sunroof 2 121 TO Deactivate ioe bccn mme 112 Closing Sunroof Express 121 E d Pinch Protect 121 HE Pinch Protect Override 122 To Accelerate For Passing 113 Venting Sunroof Express 122 x E E Sunshade Operation 122 VOUHES Resin AGS Hs Wind Buffeting 122 PUNE AiR f Sunroof 122 Dons Opp T SEqUPDO catene 19 Ignition Off Operation 122 Programming HomeLink ue Sunroof Fully Closed 123 Electrical Power Outlets 123 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 125 IN Cup Holders 15404 della e dM s 125 Front Seat Cup Holders Standard 125 Front Seat Cup Holders Premium 126 66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M mS
17. e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hos
18. 177 Tachometer Dn ee E eH HE 135 Telescoping Steering Column 106 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 184 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 135 263 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 25 Theft System Security Alarm 25 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 127 Tilt Steering Column 106 Tire and Loading Information Placard 222 Tire Identification Number TIN 221 Tire Markings 218 Tire Safety Information 218 Tires uus cv Ages ard bad a 60 226 349 Aging Life of Tires 232 Air Pressure e tmr uds 226 Alignment xg igo mue Sola ees 233 Chains s ses sm d Eb RS dk 238 Changing 263 266 CompactSpare 229 Flat Changing 263 General Information 226 INDEX 363 High Speed oue Rp d I RARE 228 Recreational 259 Inflation Pressures 227 Weight cs csset ed e b Ee dk Sols Aad des 251 Jackitigr s inten e tene Toe aee e 264 266 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 259 Life of Tires rz 14 IS LL EOS 232 Traction Control 107 Load Capacity 222 223 Traction Control Switch 107 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 234 Trailer Towing
19. Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you
20. Inside Day Night If Equipped Equipped iei eb lees Equipped Lacan eed adele ead Outside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Power Remote Control Mirrors Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 69 Hands Free Communication UConnect IE Equipped iussi RS em 4 eae d 70 Operations 71 Phone Call Features 77 UConnect System Features 79 Advanced Phone Connectivity 83 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System 85 56205 oe repo e rot 90 PowersSe ts 90 Power Reclining Seats 91 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 64 Lumbar Support 92 Heated Seats If Equipped 92 Head Restraints 94 Folding Rear Seat 94 Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 95 To Open And Close The Hood 96 DETE ai are d a 98 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 98 Interior Lights cci eem 98 Headlight Switch 99 Multi
21. ON OFF or turning off the ignition erases the speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the lever up and release ACC RES Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set speed can be increased by pushing the lever up and holding ACC RES When the lever is released a new set speed will be established Pushing the lever up and releasing ACC RES once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is pushed up and released speed increases NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push the lever down and hold COAST Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Pushing down and releasing the lever COAST once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is pushed down and released speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend
22. Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Turn Head lights on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash once and the horn will chirp once to
23. 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belts WARNING seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
24. Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 231 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread
25. X The wipers and washers are operated by the multi function lever The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Rotate the end of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left tany posrHomothenthan pk Windshield Wiper Washer Control Windshield Washers To use the front washer push the lever in and hold while spray is desired If the lever is released while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pushed while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn OFF eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Mist Feature Push the wiper lever in to activate a single wipe to clear road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is pushed in the wipers will continue to operate Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed operation Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position then turn the e
26. ately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light comes on during normal vehicle operation vehicle has been run ning for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related tran sponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
27. Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 123 Seals 25322654 2 Ra xx awa oe 90 Steering E Ah 217 Steering Checking 295 Sunroot 20 LT ale GPa Aas 120 Wind Ows ivwscasedoa ty ues Fine eae 28 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 37 Preparation for Jacking 264 Pretensioners Seat Belts suche owe awadevreeeec ees 36 Programmable Electronic Features 116 119 150 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 116 119 Radial Ply Tires 229 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 301 Radio Broadcast Signals 153 Radio Operation 154 161 181 Radio Remote Controls 178 Radio Satellite 172 Radio Sound Systems 154 161 Rear Seat Folding 94 Rear Window Defroster 182 Rearview Mirrors 67 Reclining Front Seats 91 Recorder Event Data 50 Recreational Towing 259 Refrigerant iste ce areata a Gea AS 295 Reminder Seat Belt 36 Remote Keyless Entry 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 178 Remote Trunk Release 27 Replacement Tires NENNEN INDEX 361 Reporting Safety Defects
28. CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the follow ing precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chai
29. NENNEN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275 CAUTION Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result The only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS lA 7 Engine iod puso 279 3 5L Engine
30. O 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator This light will illuminate when the electronic speed control is ON 6 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 7 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will fla
31. Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio station frequencies any one of twelve radio station preset frequencies CD disc number CD track number tape or any one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle AUDIO MODE Button If Compass Temp Audio is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the radio mode will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite SAT accordingly UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Tape Player Operation Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the button to advance the radio to the next preset next track on the cassette Press the bottom of the FUNC Station to change the side of the tape being SCROLL button once to either listen to the beginning of TION played if so equipped or to change the cur the current track or to listen to the beginning of the SELECT rent CD track being played if so equipped previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current Button track begins to play when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek twice to listen to the second track on the tape three times v up and down the radio stations CD track to listen to the third track and so forth SCROLL
32. The recirculation feature can be selected with c the mode control knob You may choose be tween Bi Level Recirculation and Panel Recir culation air outlets while in this mode Nor mally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger This is accomplished by a dual sun sensor in the top of the instrument panel and an infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit There are also various sensors monitored by this system which take account for vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 The infrared sensor ind
33. WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effe
34. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is located near the left front corner of the windshield The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN LOCATION Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN plate Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Word About Your Keys 11 Ignition Key Removal 11 Key In Ignition Reminder 12 HO Pr 12 IN nte Nea toes 12 Replacement 14 Customer Key Programming 14 General Information
35. and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the file or MP3 and WMA selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RND PTY Button
36. break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal The selector lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the selector lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec tor lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position Stopping For brief stops leave the transmission in gear and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal For longer stops with the engine idling shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake When stopping the vehicle uphill do not hold it with the accelerator use the brake This avoids unnecessary trans mission heat build up Maneuvering To maneuver in tight areas control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the br
37. upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleani
38. upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the
39. 10 Amp Door Modules Power Mirrors Yellow P H Red if equipped Steering Control 19 10Amp Stop Lights Module Red 31 20 32 za 33 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Fuse Circuits Cavity Fuse Circuits 35 5 Amp Amplifier if equipped 40 5 Amp Heated Seats if equipped Orange Antenna Ignition Delay Orange Inside Rearview Mirror Overhead Console if Manual Temperature Control equipped Passenger Door early build if equipped Lock amp Express Power Win 41 10Amp Heater Control except dow Switch if equipped Red early build MTC Tire Pres Power Mirrors if equipped sure Monitoring if equipped Rear Denga 42 30Amp Front Blower Motor 36 20Amp Hands Free Phone if Pink Xellow equipped Media System 43 30Amp Amplifier if equipped Monitor DVD if egu ipped Pink 5 Rear Denki Radio Satellite Receiver if lif oped F equipped 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped Front ED Blue Control Module FCM 37 15 Amp Transmission NAG1 Guntoolc3t eduipbed Blue quipp 38 5 Amp Analog Clock Cargo Light Orange Overhead Console if equipped 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if equipped Red ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out
40. 273 Euel a ERES EAE 241 Adding ose oos te des 244 Additives ek ree n Rs 243 Clean Ait ree rer AIR EINE 241 Filler Cap Gas Cap 244 aegra intern ks 291 Gasoline se sae RP Vus 241 Gauge hee nete ea a 135 LR abe eR par UE S RE eles 305 Octane Rating 241 324 Requirements 241 323 Tank Capacity 323 PUG 4 tees PE Mr 244 FUSES os ur vn PAARE NO ex ati 311 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 115 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 244 Gasoline Clean Air 241 Gasoline Fuel 241 Gasoline Reformulated 242 Gauges Coolant Temperature 135 Fuel ike dare o iR 135 Speedometer iuri rei LIS 135 Tachomietet na man e 135 Gear Ranges re 199 General Information 15 24 238 Glass Cleaning 309 Gross Axle Weight Rating 247 250 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 247 249 Hands Free Phone UConnect 70 Hazard Warning Flasher 262 Head Restraints 94 Headlights Beam ecd tdv Nato 103 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 103 On With Wipers
41. 347 Restraint Head 94 Restraints Occupant 31 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 273 Rotation Tires 240 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 60 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 60 Safety Defects Reporting 347 Safety Information Tire 218 Safety Tips i ete eine Em eter ts es 59 Satellite Radio 172 Satellite Radio Antenna 175 Schedule Maintenance 328 Seat Belt Maintenance 310 Seat Belt Reminder 36 Seat e RR ES ENS 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 35 And Pregnant Women 37 Child Restraint 51 52 57 Extenders ete M ML M Ps 37 Front Seat cine Re S EX 32 Operating Instructions 32 Pretensioners 36 Reminder 2d aks Ale be eb 138 Seals seh de whe pale Cee ch dub wees 90 Heated 2 MED 92 Lumbar Support 92 RPOWER ue ou vete en E ood neue al eU 90 Rear Folding 94 Reclining A acu ER nets 91 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 25 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 299 324 Self Sealing Tires 234 Sentry Key Immobilizer
42. 99 Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center if equipped and radio when the parking lights or head lights are on Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog 3 lights Headlight Switch 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Multi Function Lever The multi function lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 813a59cc Multi Function Lever Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation
43. Adding one quart 9L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines 8131ee6a Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287 CAUTION Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safe zone or operating with oil levels that exceed the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 Trailer towing Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manu
44. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt severa
45. Canada Inc Customer Center Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contrac
46. ENDINE S uui de tu em ed ead 241 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 230 3 5L And 5 7L Engines 241 Tire Spinning uA BS as 230 Spark Knock sse cate ee 241 Tread Wear Indicators 231 Reformulated Gasoline 241 Life OF Tire aw 232 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 242 Replacement Tires 232 MMT In Gasoline 242 Alignment And 233 Materials Added To Fuel 243 Self Sealing Tires If Equipped 234 Fuel System Cautions 243 Wi Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped 234 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 244 Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System 234 244 Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System 235 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 244 General Information 238 W Vehicle Loading 247 la Tire Chains 222202222202 A 238 Vehicle Certification Label 247 la Snow Tires 239 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 247 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 240 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 247 NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 195 Overloading e eee 248 Towing Requirements 254 Loading
47. Entry System 21 Keys ec es n us ea Sep a T n Knee Bolster Lap Shoulder Belts LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Latch Plate 358 INDEX Latches Hoodi 5 4 eoo dos deb ase 96 Lead Free Gasoline 241 Tires Ne eh out 232 Lights edat ex ace qu edes 60 98 Airbag Speo 43 50 60 136 Anti Lock 141 Automatic Headlights 101 Brake Warning 139 Bulb Replacement 317 Courtesy Reading 98 Daytime Running 102 Dimmer Switch Headlight 100 Engine Temperature Warning 136 ose tu oso dans 103 138 Hazard Warning Flasher 262 Headlight Switch 100 Headlights a Aa ee 100 Headlights On With Wipers 102 High Beam Indicator 137 Illuminated Entry 15 Instrument Cluster 100 IDtetlO Loc caede eee 98 Dacense xg eee AR RAS 322 Lights On Reminder 102 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 141 Oil Pressure 137 Reading etes Al ae ah 114 Seat Belt Reminder 138 Setvice que pe P EL E es 317 318 Service Engine Soon Malfunction
48. Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 165 400 Ibs 811 4911 226 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 227 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear p
49. Indicator 141 Turn Signal 100 103 Voltage toe REM Qf ER ee E 138 Load Leveling System 128 Loading Vehicle 247 248 Capaciles ey 248 TIVES pape euet bue heen SEN eva 222 Locks DOO usen edit ble RAE AERE 16 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EAT CE ea eee uai RE 55 Lubrication Body 296 Lumbar Support 92 Maintenance Free Battery 292 Maintenance Procedures 285 NENNEN INDEX 359 Maintenance Schedule 328 Occupant Restraints Sched le A issu ated bla ack 339 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Schedule B 331 Oil Engine i had eden ee ERU Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 141 283 Capacity DAVE ae Manual Service 347 Change Interval Mini Trip Computer 144 Ch cking uere tectus MITrOTS bie BF v eh eb e date OS 67 Disposal c oen at das Automatic Dimming 67 ouo tv e enit MOL ote Electric Remote 69 Filter Disposal Exterior Folding 68 Identification Logo Heated c vate ie hk re ee a teat 69 Materials Added to
50. Light CHMSL LED Licensen oa a de T RA een rS 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light and Front Sidemarker Light e Open the hood e Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counter clockwise and pull out Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver s side head light assembly Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly Reinstall the socket assembly and turn clockwise NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 HIGH BEAM LOW BEAM HEADLAMP BULB HEADLAMP BULB SIDEMARKER 815c2420 LAMP BULB 81502447 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol PARK TURN LAMP BULB 81502424 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Backup Light Side Marker Light Tail Turn Light 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the and Tail Stop Light tail light assembly 1 Open the Trunk 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly uus 2 912044 7 Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access 3 Pull back the trunk liner bulbs Turn bulb sockets counter clockwise to remove
51. NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 TAIL TURN LAMP BULB BACKUP E LAMP BULB 815c226b 815c226f TAIL STOP LAMP BULB SIDEMARKER pd LAMP BULB 815c212 815c227a 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket 9 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the tail light assembly 10 Close the trunk License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly and pull the bulb from the socket B04Dbic7 3 Replace the bulb and reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 4 Reattach the light to the rear fascia NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel approximate 2 7 Liter Engines 87 Octane 18 gallons 68 liters 3 5 Liter Engines 87 to 89 Octane 18 gallons 68 liters 5 7 Liter Engines 87 to 89 Octane 19 gallons 72 liters Engine Oil With Filter 2 7 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 0 qts 5 7 liters 3 5 Liter Engines SAE 10W 30 API Certified 6 0 qts 5 7 liters 5 7 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 0 qts 6 6 liters Cooling System 2 7 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 9 7 qts 9 2 liters Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 10 6 qts 10 0 liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 1
52. North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook e You can say letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose connection to the UConnect system When this hap pens
53. OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED WARNING The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper Your motorized door or gate will open and close ate devices such as garage door openers motorized while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries cause serious injury or death to people and pets or are needed damage to objects NOTE The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis abled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active WARNING For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opene
54. Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has pa
55. Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in th
56. SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacture s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tensioner Belt tension is controlled by means of an aut
57. Starting and Operating for details In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants which have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 3 5L Engines SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil is allowed for use the 3 5L Engine during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289 ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART F 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 209 18 12 7 0 16 27 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change 809c2ec8 10W 30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section In areas where these grades are not generally available higher SAE grades may be used Lubricants which have both an SAE grade number and the API Certification Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container should be used Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct
58. The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds programmable when leaving your ve hicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on the delay will be cancelled If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the headlight switch below the dimmer control To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the fog light switch NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headligh
59. Windshield 60 183 188 Delay Intermittent Wipers 105 Diagnostic System Onboard 282 Dimmer Switch Headlight 103 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 301 Door Locks 222 4 Rp Re 16 Door Locks Automatic 17 Door Opener Garage 115 Drive Belts ril RENI E 290 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 272 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 176 Electric Remote Mirrors 69 Electrical Power Outlets 123 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 142 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck NENNEN INDEX 355 Hazard Warning Flasher 262 JACKING puros quel e est does Eos 263 Jump Staring oes Sort o dete e s 270 Overheating 262 TOWING ora hte EL AUR A s 274 Emission Control System Maintenance 283 328 ENGIN 2 ES 279 280 281 Air Cleaner cua dures deu 291 Air Cleaner Filter 290 Block Heater 198 Break In Recommendations 59 Checking Oil Level 285 286 Compartment 279 280 281 Coolant Antifreeze 299 324 Coolihig 275 e Hy eus 298 Exhaust Gas Caution 59 244
60. YOUR VEHICLE M Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new sentry keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into
61. activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will pulse headlights park lights will flash the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobilizer light located in the instrument cluster will flash and the vehicle will not start If the alarm is triggered and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light only operation the system will then rearm itself To arm the system Remove the key from the ignition switch and either 1 Press a power door lock switch while the driver s or passenger s door is open 2 Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmit ter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobilizer light will flash If it does not illuminate the system is not arming 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If you open a door during this arming period the system will cancel the arming process You must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences to rearm the system To disarm the system Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Also using a valid sentry key and moving the ignition switch to the ON START posi tion will disarm the system If you disarm the system and access the liftgate area the system must be rearmed as described previously when closing the liftgate If some thin
62. all four active road tires NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure 236 STARTING AND OPERATING M The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will i illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will flash on and off for 10 to 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e 4 Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules e Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The system consists of tire pressure monitoring sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting hole a central receiver module Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Mes sages in the EVIC and Telltale Light NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel tire sizes and significantly different tire placard pressures the placard pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo date the customer selected wheel tire combinations rec ommended by DaimlerC
63. are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if so equipped left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times
64. be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressin
65. be cleaned regularly such as steel wool or scouring powder which will with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To scratch metal and painted surfaces remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage a month the wheels protective finish It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well open packaged and sealed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or Mopar Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
66. belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CH ildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible ch
67. can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete o
68. changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and mm suspension components You could lose control e Fast tire wear and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Vehicle pull to right or left capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 234 STARTING AND OPERATING SELF SEALING TIRES IF EQUIPPED A non hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0 19 in 5 mm to
69. crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way Do n
70. engaged 212 STARTING AND OPERATING e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when autostick is engaged PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the Park position Parking Brake To release the parking brake pull out on the parking brake release located on the left side of the instrument panel NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 213 The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Parking Brake Release Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the sele
71. fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equ
72. gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The EVIC display will show Channel X Trained where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Proceed with Programming step four to complete Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be pro grammed at any time beginning with Programming step 2 Reprogrammin
73. i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code use
74. in any part of the system it turns on the airbag warning light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag in the unlikely event that a rear facing infant seat is in the front passenger seat NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger air bag is turned off The PAD indica tor lamp illuminates the front passenger air bag icon and the words PASS AIR BAG to show that the passenger air bag will not inflate during a collision requiring air bags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the PAD indicator lamp is not illuminated 81321cb8 Passenger Airbag Disable
75. is shut off Checking the oil level while e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu proper fit racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark At Each Oil Change e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Inspect the exhaust system e Change the engine oil filter Once a Month e Inspect the brake hoses e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension damage components e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps as required M A T E N A N C C H D U L E 8 Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder and add as needed SCHEDULE B 331 SCHEDULE Follow schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an 9 Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C Stop and go driving Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 Trailer
76. jeopar Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated BAS malfunction indicator light and the yellow ESP dize the user s safety or the safety of others warning light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the position They should go out with the engine running If 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving condi tions The system operates when the vehicle speed is greater than 7 8 mph 12 6 km h The ESP system corrects for over understeering of the vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel Engine torque is also limited system sensor s information varies from the driver s intended path The ESP warning light also flashes when traction control is activated If the ESP warning light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions When the ESP warning light is illumi nated continuously the ESP is switched off To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP press the ESP switch the ESP warning light in the instrument cluster goes out Avoid spinning one drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drive train The ESP warning light located in the instru ment cluster starts to flash as so
77. just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers See your authorized dealer for a trailer hitch engineered specifically for your vehicle NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle plus a removable hitch head and spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer frame See your authorized dealer for a trailer hitch engineered specifically for your vehicle Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content and for a trailer hitch engineered spe cifically for your vehicle The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ib
78. minimize the loss of air pressure This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Re ceiver Module NOTE Itis particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will flash on and off for 10 to 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light NOTE For vehicles with optional wheel tire sizes and significantly different tire placard pressures the placard pressure value and the low pressure threshold value is re programmable at your authorized dealer to accommo date th
79. mission damage Drive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear selection The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever in the DRIVE position The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear Shifting into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or to slow the vehicle down is possible Downshifts can also be performed Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the best gear for acceleration 206 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in D direction the transmis sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revol
80. of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from P Park into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK P Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine e Shift into D and resume driving NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 203 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure ment to determine if the problem could recur those in and near the vehicle As with al
81. of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC the radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable thr
82. press the SCROLL but ton until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC Then press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function nor mally UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbah 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To set the variance Turn the ignition switch ON Then press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds Then press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance displays in the EVIC Both the Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number will display in the EVIC Then press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map Finally press and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the
83. pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
84. smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates when the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately C amp D NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate icon button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculate to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging NOTE See Operating Tips chart for Manual A C Control at the end of this section for suggested control settings in different we
85. soft cloth e Carefully tuck the front followed by the rear then side edges of the cup holder into the center console NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 CAUTION Front Power Distribution Center A power distribution center is located in the engine When installing the Power Distribution Center compartment This center contains fuses and relays cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop ss nme aues erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribu tion Center and possibly result in a electrical system failure Power Distribution Centers E When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Front Power Distribution Center Front Power Distribution Center Fuses Cavity Fuse Circuits 1 2 Es x 3 15 Amp Adjustable Pedals if equipped Blue 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Fuse Circuits Cavity Fuse Circuits 4 20 Amp AC Clutch Horn 16 Yellow 17 30 Amp Antilock Brakes System ABS 5 Pink Valves Powertrain Control 6 15 Amp Front Control Module FCM Module PCM Blue 18 30 Amp Windshield Wiper Wa
86. someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI 414 KPa Cold Inflation Pressure Avoid driving more than 50 miles 80 km before replacing tire and wheel This tire is designed as an emergency spare only do not exceed 50 MPH 80 km h speed 270 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES M Wheel Cover Installation If Required 3 Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the VALVE VALVE two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to STEM NOTCH install the cover 4 Return to Changing a Tire Section Item 9 above JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS LOW WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever MOUNTING udi TUD COVER LUG NUT the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition LE switch is on You can be hurt by the fan 1 Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve stem 2 Align the valve notc
87. speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control switch consists of a stalk mounted lever located on the steering column 813a59be Speed Control Lever 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Activate Push and release the speed control lever ON O OFF once and an indicator light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster when the elec tronic speed control is active To turn the system OFF Push and release the lever ON OFF again and the system and indicator will turn off Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed pull the lever toward you and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE Speed control will only function in third fourth or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode if equipped NOTE The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the lever away from you CANCEL or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory Pushing and releasing the lever
88. switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press Preset 1 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks and WMA Inserting Compact Disc s CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of th
89. the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position e The key can be removed from the ignition switch only with the selector lever in the PARK position With the key removed the selector lever is locked in the PARK position For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON positions Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the shifter lever The override can be activated by pressing the pink colored tab which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin While the override is pressed the shifter can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return rubber storage tray to its original position Brake Interlock Override Reverse Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com pletely stopped STARTING AND OPERATING 205 Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage in NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans
90. the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Voice Command Tree Main Menu 2 Towing English Francais Last See Enter Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup Number on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a53fc 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Number New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Entries Listed one at a time Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Cleared Enter Location Entry Deleted 8131b294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Voice Tree Setup Setup Toggle Pair List Phones Say Priority Select a language Confirmati
91. the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permis sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be dis closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of DaimlerChrysler product litigation involving 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag de
92. the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be chang
93. the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key has been lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK positi
94. the roof including adding a sunroof to your interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deploy vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent ment attachments bolts or screws for installation on the ve hicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Cur tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the small child category If your vehicle is so equipped the Side Curtain Airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to
95. to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes on skin flush contaminated area vehicles immediately with large quantities of water 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam loads mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post A in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground B of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan Jump Starting DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the wheels to p
96. vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle 200 STARTING AND OPERATING The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P Park position When shifting into P Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P Park position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the shift lever is released Otherwise damage to the shifter could result R Reverse For moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the lever to R Reverse except when rocking the vehicle N Neutral Engine may be started in this range WARNING Do not coast in N Neutral and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle D Overdrive This range should b
97. was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position o 80e54edT Ignition Key Position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged To activa
98. with seats and seat belts Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat WARNING Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not go around your lap protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you TN A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Latch Plate To Buckle A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch you from injury during a collision You are more likely late into the
99. 00 000 Mile 14 6 qts 13 8 liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 27 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 3 5 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 10W 30 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 5 7 Liter Use API Certified engine oil SAE 5W 20 is recommended Refer to the en gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment Oil Filter 2 7 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Oil Filter 5 7 Liter Fuel Selection 2 7 Liter Fuel Selection 3 5 Liter Mopar 05281090 or equivalent 87 Octane 87 to 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7 Liter 87 to 89 Octane MAINTAINING
100. 91 pille control for comfort WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS zi and turn on Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle A dm set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel 8 or Bi Level EC with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature 404 Temperature control for com uocis COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor CA COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost ort if windows are clear 9 HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost 9 needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS St
101. ALLY WINDSHIELD CHARGING HEATED MIRROR DEFROST PA rx 2 ln mnl ENGINE COOLANT CHILD SEAT WINDSHIELD WIPER TEMPERATURE TETHER ANCHOR AND WASHER 3 cy Ww AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN LATCH MALFUNCTION ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT SPEED CONTROL SRS bes XJ if AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL HIGH BEAM HORN UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT RESTRAINT SYSTEM Low 9 Z LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH BRAKING SYSTEM e a dc FRONTFOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR OUTLET RECIRCULATION SEAT BELT x P 74 1 EXTERIORBULB LIFTGATE RELEASE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN FAILURE AND LIFTGATE LOWER AIR OUTLET OPEN DOME LIGHT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING SIDE AIRBAG 200 L EMERGENCY HAZARD PARK LIGHTS SLIDING DOOR CONVERTIBLE TOP UP RELEASE HANDLE 2 O PASSENGER WINDOW LOCK LIGHTER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN AIRBAG OFF INTRODUCTION 5 2 DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PEDALS 1 WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR te CONVERTIBLE VOICE RECOGNITION 4 WINDOW DOWN BUTTON e WER UCONNECT BUTTON STEERING FLUID o R SEE OWNER S TRACTION CONTROL MANUAL ISO INSTUMENT PANEL WARNING ILLUMINATION ESP ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM BRAKE MASTER LIGHTING ASSIST SYSTEM m 81632929 6 INTRODUCTION Se
102. Aibag Side aii colas gel 46 Airbag Window Side Curtain 38 46 Alarm System Security Alarm 25 Alignment and Balance 233 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 175 Antifreeze Engine Coolant Disposal 2 25 east ene badges uten 301 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 214 Anti Lock Warning Light 141 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 25 Appearance Care 307 Auto Down Power Windows 29 Auto Up Power Windows 29 Automatic Dimming Mirror 67 Automatic Door Locks 17 18 Automatic Headlights 101 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 184 Automatic Transmission 198 203 306 Adding Fluid 306 325 Fluid and Filter Changes 306 Fluid Change 306 Fluid Level 306 aoinne eo eR 325 Gear Ranges 2 2 2 4 4 199 Torque Converter 201 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 202 Autostick 205 210 NENNEN INDEX 353 Ball Joints dis ame Ae EN 296 Battery s aor de und Ly eos 292 JUMP Starting men 270 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Location iiie se EE M
103. Button 12 Ash Tray 18 Headlamp Switch Traction Control System Button If Equipped 815ff09e UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133 STANDARD INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 2 3 4 5 16 17 6 8178939c 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 2 3 4 5 16 17 6 60 100 120 40 99 120 o km h zoff 140 2400 160 30 AM Umi red Ww 81789479 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Standard Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles or kilometers A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light If Equipped
104. CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation NOTE Your vehicle s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com
105. Child Safety Locks 20 Clean Air Gasoline 241 Climate Control 181 Clock 22 402 ans ee i 156 162 178 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 181 Compact Spare Tire 229 COMPASS 2 csr ae UE qa eh RR 146 Compass Calibration 146 354 INDEX Compass Variance 147 Computer Trip Travel 144 Console x so veda ey 127 Console 127 Console Overhead 114 Contract Service 346 Coolant Pressure Cap 301 Cooling System 298 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 300 Coolant Capacity 323 Coolant Level 299 301 Disposal of Used Coolant 301 Drain Flush and Refill 299 Inspection eoe exa Pete mea s 301 Points to Remember 302 Pressure Capi 301 Radiator 301 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 299 323 324 Cruise Control Speed Control 111 Cup Holder 125 310 Customer Assistance 344 Data Recorder Event 50 Dealer Service 284 Defroster Rear Window 182 Defroster
106. E D shifter position The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 207 A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure Stop the vehicle Move the selector lever to the PARK position Turn off the engine Wait approximately 10 seconds N Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times Follow the reset procedure described under Tem porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section In Permanent Limp Home Mode PARK P REVERSE R and NEUTRAL N will continue to operate SEC OND gear will operate in the DRIVE D shifter position The malfunction indicator light may illuminate 208 STARTING AND OPERATING Automatic Transmission General
107. EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC provides the following telephone information Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 per cent Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection e UConnect Active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The 7 number of horizontal bars increase as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength gt The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call Incom ing Call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that H the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode Analog Roam ing Voice Mail EI Text Message Battery Strength The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the battery strength of the UConnect phone UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone conn
108. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability STARTING AND OPERATING 233 WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in
109. Function 100 Headlights Parking Lights Instrument Panel acus idera et sts n 100 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 101 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 102 Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 102 Lights On Reminder 102 Headlight Time Delay 102 Fog Lights If Equipped 103 Turn Signals 5 103 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 103 Flash Lo Pass E ug 103 Windshield Wipers And Washers 104 Windshield Washers 104 Mist Feature Suite e e ug Rede RA 105 Windshield Wiper Operation 105 Intermittent Wiper System 105 Adding Washer Fluid 105 B Tiit Telescoping Steering Column 106 Traction Control System TCS IE Rquipped gt sS eee eene 107 NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 108 Canadian Programming Programming 118 Electronic Stability Program ESP Using HomeLink 119 enu HIN
110. GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1096 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight
111. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly 9 e The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval The light flickers or comes and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In
112. If this occurs disarm the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instru ment panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in Park before the switch will operate Trunk Release Button The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter two times With the ignition ON the trunk open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the key in lock position or key out the trunk open symbol will be displayed until the trunk is closed TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Trunk Emergency Release WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows 809634cd Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is eq
113. Information Driving Style Selector lever position CAUTION bis Accelerator position Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow Vehicle speed ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the NOTE engine is at idle speed After selecting any driving position wait a moment to Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL cardo Duy berora into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed If there is a need to restart your engine be sure to cycle Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans is firmly on the brake pedal mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are Altitude self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new Vehicle Loading vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 209
114. Light 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when teenagers most children in a forward facing child restraint or booster seats most children that can properly wear the vehicle s seat belt and when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an air bag occurs For almost all properly installed rear facing child restraints the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger air bag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD indicator light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger air bag can cause death or seri ous injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint see section on child re straints Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator SAHIG Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects SEE Oe Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies a
115. NNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light comes on con tinuously with the engine running a malfunction has BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of your authorized dealer as soon as possible a the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those STABILITY PROGRAM ESP IF WARNING ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns or resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a ESP combined with BAS The yellow ESP BAS reckless or dangerous manner which could
116. NTER AIR CLEANER FILTER REMOTE JUMP START WASHER ENGINE OIL ENGINE COOLANT POWER STEERING POSITIVE BATTERY POST BOTTLE FLUID CHECK OIL FILL BOTTLE FLUID CHECK 8125e2bd 3 5L Engine Compartment NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281 5 7L ENGINE POWER AUTOMATIC COOLANT BRAKE FLUID DISTRIBUTION TRANSMISSION PRESSURE RESERVOIR COOLANT CENTER FLUID FILL CAP ACCESS COVER BOTTLE WASHER REMOTE JUMP START ENGINE OIL ENGINE AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING BOTTLE POSITIVE BATTERY POST FLUID CHECK FILL FILTER FLUID CHECK 815 80 5 71 Engine Compartment 282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further
117. P 271 292 Bearings sudes a PPAR UA gated aps 307 Belts Drive 290 Body Mechanism Lubrication 296 B Pillar Location 222 Brake Assist System 108 Brake Parking 212 Brake System 214 303 Anti Lock ABS 214 Fluid Check 22 22 eh ae 304 325 FIOSES v ois elses aes 303 Warning Light 139 Brake Transmission Interlock 210 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 59 Bulb Replacement 318 Bulbs light gt kee emn 317 Calibration Compass 146 Capacities Fluid 323 Caps Filler Fuel wis aad bid woke deh end 244 Radiator Coolant Pressure 301 Car Washes gt IN ER Ned 307 Carbon Monoxide Warning 59 244 Cargo Tie Downs 127 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 180 Catalytic Converter 291 CD Compact Disc Player 154 161 Cellular Phone 70 Chains Tire os amu oes ore ae 238 Changing A Flat Tire 263 Chart Tire Sizing 219 Child Restraint 51 53 55 57 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 55
118. Release Emergency 28 Trunk Release Remote Control 27 Turn Signals 103 136 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 349 Universal Transmitter 115 Unleaded Gasoline 241 Vanity Mirrors 69 Variance Compass 147 Vehicle Certification Label 247 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 223 247 248 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 190 317 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 25 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 176 Warning Flasher Hazard 262 Warnings and Cautions 6 Warranty Information 346 Washer Adding Fluid 105 297 Washers Windshield 104 Washing Vehicle 307 Wheel Alignment and Balance 233 Wheel and Wheel Trim 308 Wheel Bearings 307 Wind Buffeting 30 122 Window Airbag Side Curtain 38 46 Window Fogging 184 190 WUD sco e ps etd e d S e vU M 28 POWeL i22 ede ined RR 28 Windshield Defroster 183 188 Windshield Washers 104 297 Windshield Wi
119. Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat Thelap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder
120. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 6 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 10 INDEX 5 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Introduction 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help a
121. T PANEL 145 history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears
122. T PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is obse
123. X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine X Replace the spark plugs 2 7L 3 5L Engines X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Change the rear axle fluid X Replace the air conditioning filter X Flush and replace engine coolant at 102 000 miles if X not done at 60 months Rotate the tires X X M E N A N C E C H D U L E 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H D U L E 8 338 SCHEDULE Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engines X Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X Replace the air conditioning filter X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months X if not replaced at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X This maintenance is recom
124. YOUR VEHICLE If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front amp Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors trunk and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should b
125. YOUR VEHICLE 325 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Rear Axle API Certified GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Emission Control System Maintenance 328 Schedule et orate rt Maintenance 5 328 Schedule sec use ERES M N N C E C H D U L E 5 8 M A N A N C C H D U L E 8 328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspectio
126. acknowledge the signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sec tion of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure To unlatch the trunk Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off when the ignition is switched to the ACC or ON position after the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have t
127. airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Accident Response Fea
128. akes Accelerate gently and never abruptly step on the accelerator To rock a vehicle out of soft ground mud or snow alternately shift from forward to reverse while applying only slight acceleration Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunc tion indicator light to come on Turn off the engine and restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication 210 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system BTSI that holds the gearshift lever in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the gear selector lever out of the P Park position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in D Drive position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal opera tion AUTOSTICK If Equipped Autostick 3 5L Engines Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking el
129. al NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Stan dard MS 6395 Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specifi cation MS 6395 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 7L and 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE Vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System under
130. al law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance or damage the emission control system e out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against c
131. ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or
132. any accumu lation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM 15 HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en gine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool ant is
133. arbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle M 81368080 Fuel Filler Door NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 245 NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap and may result in a malfunction indicator light on the instrument clus ter A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Gas Cap Tether Hook 246 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap i
134. arting Procedures 196 Normal Starting 196 Engine Block Heater If Equipped 198 Mi Transmission Shifting 198 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 198 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 203 Automatic Transmission General Information 208 Bl AutoStick If Equipped 210 AutoStick 3 5L Engines 210 AutoStick 5 7L Engines 211 H Parking 212 Brake System 214 Anti Lock Brake System W Power Steering E Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L Engine Only 218 Tire Safety Information 218 Tire Markings 218 Tire Identification Number TIN 221 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 222 Bl Tires General Information 226 Tire Pressure 249 ue eem s 226 Tire Inflation Pressures 227 194 STARTING AND Radia Ply 229 W Fuel Requirements 241 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 229 2 7 E
135. assenger s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuck led the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously See page 36 for more information 19 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 messages See page 142 for more information only on vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted switches NOTE On non EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer is located here 20 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anti lock brake system The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions T
136. ast Forward FF 165 Rewind RW 165 Tape 165 Scan Button die sg eO RR Ie 165 Changing Tape Direction 165 Metal Tape Selection 165 Pinch Roller Release 165 Noise Reduction 166 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD AudioPlay 22 02 2 cede Res ix 166 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play RE RES 167 Notes On Playing MP3Files 168 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 WMA Audio 170 Load Eject Button CD Mode For And WMA Play iet ette eret nae 170 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 172 System Activation 172 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number 5 173 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And RAK Radis males eles EER 173 NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131 Selecting a 174 Satellite Radio Operation 180 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 174 W Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 180 Using The PTY Program Ty
137. ather conditions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in your Owner s Manual for filter replacement instructions Operating Tips UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1
138. atterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 228 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation
139. aust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING If you are required to drive with the trunk open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED
140. being played then say the priority number of the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to delete You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number of the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in
141. buckle until vou heata click to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your P y shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack From Belt WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t beat the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING A frayed or
142. button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the customer can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range used when the AUTO setting is not desired The left control can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any sp
143. ck the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 9 kg 20 lbs Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 165 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collisio
144. cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve 1 Change the automatic transmission fluid and X filter Replace the air conditioning filter X X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months X if not done at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X M C E C H D U L E 8 H 336 SCHEDULE MEM i Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X d quired S Replace the air cleaner filter X X H Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X D rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve 1 Replace the air conditioning filter X 8 Rotate the tires X X X NENNEN SCHEDULE 337 Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X
145. coming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has establishe
146. commendations 59 B Safety Dp a hen dd SEP ENSE 59 Exhaust Gas xs er eau 59 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle siae LEE 60 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 60 NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with The shift lever must be in PARK Turn the key to the either side up LOCK position then remove the key 815afata _ 80e54ed7 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Positions The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key NOTE The power window switches radio power sun code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can roof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask 10 minutes programmable after the ignition switch has your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this place feature This feature is programmable through the elec tronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Refer to Personal Settings in the electronic vehicle informa tion center EVIC Section of this manual for details WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons child or others could be injured Childr
147. ct on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 249 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS Example Only 815aed44 Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 Ibs 932 kg 819 Load Including driver pass 271 lbs 579 Ibs sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 lbs 2384 Ibs 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 lbs 2708 lbs 1155 kg 1228 kg TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing m Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight
148. ctor out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 214 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake
149. cur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt acro
150. d press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone aft
151. d be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped For vehicles equipped with Autostick By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase en
152. d by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 Tett 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF NEVER EXCEED XXX 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 109268 P 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 223 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carryin
153. d restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exh
154. d to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe wh
155. d when the a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the radio mode also advances the radio to the next preset will change from AM to FM to Tape to CD or to Satellite FUNC Station changes the side of the tape being accordingly TION played if so equipped or changes the current SELECT CD track being played if so equipped when Button the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip A Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime SCROLL tomer Programmable Features The SCROLL Button button also seeks up and down the radio stations CD track numbers if so equipped or Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime satellite radio channels if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime displays radio station frequencies any one of AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies CD MODE disc number CD track number tape or any e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending on which radio is in the vehicle Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic mm Veh
156. damage to the emis sion control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine
157. de of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 81371845 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the ho
158. e Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor 238 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The TPMS can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 55120123 Canada sec suc oup ieu 2671 5120123 TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 239
159. e Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast if available from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease the frequency NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sou
160. e Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 216 STARTING AND OPERATING ABS is activated during braking under certain road or WARNING stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated debris or panic stops electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a capability Installation of such equipment should be short time after the stop performed by qualified professionals the clicking sound of solenoid valves vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce and a slight drop or fall away o
161. e Pressure Monitor Warning Light If Equipped This light will turn on continuously when there is a Low tire pressure condition The light will also turn on if a problem exist with any tire sensor When a system fault is detected the indicator light will flash repetitively for ten seconds The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset The light will remain on or flashing until the tire pressure is properly set or the problem with the sensor is corrected This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when the engine is started When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly underin flated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information Placard Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinfla tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the tire and loading information placard 23 Anti Lock Brake Light If Equipped 553 This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may s
162. e Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitc
163. e applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the c
164. e cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 Windshield Washers The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Fluid Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaus
165. e customer selected wheel tire combinations rec ommended by DaimlerChrysler NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 235 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPMS can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure mm Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module The wheel sensors monitor tire pressure and status for
166. e master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Fuel System Hoses Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated
167. e of your radio faceplate 81256256 Navigation Radio with CD Player and MP3 Capability REC combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with a color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes The unit also provides an AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Clock Setting Procedure Refer to Setting the Clock under System Settings in your Navigation User s Manual for details about setting the clock REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions 81380815 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display This is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level VOL Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to UME decrease the sound level Button
168. e previous selection if the CD is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the rad
169. e risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button Adjustable Head Restraint Folding Rear Seat Folding Rear Seats The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use When the seat back is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seat back above the seat strap NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the front si
170. e switch briefly The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition switch has been turned off Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time is customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center if equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Per sonal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual for details Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition switch has been turned off The time is customer programmable through the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section for details Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the wi
171. e used for most city and highway driving It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts and best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us ing the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly ter rain traveling into strong head winds or while tow ing heavy trailers NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 201 NOTE If the vehicle is started in cold outside tempera tures shifts into Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature Refer to the Note under Torque Con verter Clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The trans mission will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very
172. eadset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can either use the combined form voice command Phoneb
173. eceiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash The center console outlet is powered directly from the receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your battery power available at all times Items plugged into authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent switch in the LOCK position engine starting gt EN Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup Holders Standard CAUTION The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the center console e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with acces sories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the al
174. econd time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are mos
175. econds turn the key to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended STARTING AND OPERATING 197 WARNING Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic CAUTION transmission cannot be started this way Un burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be f dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not this manual for the proper jump starting proce have enough power to continue running when the key is dures and follow them carefully released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is ru
176. ection has been made Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that X the UConnect phone is currently not avail able Phone Not Avail able Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU bu
177. ed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or appears Headlights On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height
178. edges and retention teeth BLOCK 2 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267 4 Before raising the vehicle loosen but do not remove 5 Tum the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack the lug nuts of the flat tire using the lug wrench Turn the saddle with the lift area of the sill flange use the lift area wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is closest to the flat tire still on the ground 6 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 268 WHAT TO DO EMERGENCIES Se JACK SADDLE SUPPORT MUST BE POSITIONED DIRECTLY UNDER THE FLANGE OF THE SILL Jack Engagement Locations 812dab8b NENNEN WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 269 WARNING 7 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand do not pry off 8 Mount the spare tire For vehicles equipped with wheel covers see the wheel cover installation instruc tions Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare 9 Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs 10 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 11 Fully tighten the lug nuts Torque the wheel lug nuts to 100 ft Ib 135 N m 12 Store the flat tire jack and tools WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt
179. eed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable on or off 81341de7 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions Defrost 5 Air is directed the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Defrost Floor Air flows through the front and rear floor gt outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Floor a Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Bi Level 2 Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floo
180. eering pump may occur 218 STARTING AND OPERATING MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD lt Te d m SIZE amp o lt DESIGNATION 2 PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE NETT TE S GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are hig
181. egenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The 350 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 352 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 214 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 300 Adding Fuel 4 ee ere eme eres 244 Adding Washer Fluid 105 297 Additives Fuel 243 Adjustable Pedals 95 Air Conditioner Maintenance 294 Air Conditioning 181 Air Conditioning Filter 190 295 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 191 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 295 Air Conditioning System 181 Air Pressure Des 9 RS 227 ITD A neuste Teo ss agr s quive due A 38 Airbag Deployment 42 48 Airbag Light 43 50 60 136 Airbag Maintenance 49
182. ellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation p
183. en should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only occurs when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions Horn Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position to operate the horn SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indi cator Light will come on for three 3 seconds immedi
184. ent panel below the center air outlets Hazard Flasher Switch To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down In city traffic While stopped put transmission neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C NENNEN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263 removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature WARNING control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to HI This a
185. ependently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air flow temperature the air flow volume and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the right mode knob to AUTO and place the blower control left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more air flow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation The air conditioning in th
186. er ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not b
187. ere John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language
188. ers 180 000 190 000 200 000 Months 108 114 120 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required X X Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Replace the air conditioning filter X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not re X placed at 102 000 miles Rotate the tires X X X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Bi Reporting Safety Defects 347 Your Vehicle 344 Tes Nn tro en he ts had 347 Prepare For The Appointment aA Bi Publication Order 347 Prepare A 46
189. es do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Ins
190. f the brake pedal at the accurate signals for the computer end of the stop brake pedal pulsations These are all normal characteristics of ABS STARTING AND OPERATING 217 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible Damage to the power st
191. for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process NENNEN YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345 If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler
192. for off Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Heated Seat Switch eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after two hours of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after two hours NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce th
193. forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Window Airbag If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the will alter
194. g a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The EVIC display will show Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 for 20 seconds and then change to Channel X Training Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with 55 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 81351e5e Power Sunroof Controls NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING e Ne
195. g a blown fuse it is important to 7 use only a fuse having the correct amperage 8 15Amp lgnition Switch Occupant rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than Blue Classification Module OCM indicated may result in a dangerous electrical 9 20Amp Console Power Outlet system overload If a properly rated fuse contin Yellow ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit 10 EN that must be corrected 11 25 Amp Cluster without power C BRKR memory seat Driver Seat Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses Switch with power memory Cavity Fuse Circuits 2 MONE od ignition OE Draw OD 12 25 Amp Passenger Seat Switch C BRKR 2 40Amp Battery Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Cavity Fuse Circuits Cavity Fuse Circuits 13 25 Amp Door Modules except base 23 C BRKR Driver Door Lock Switch 24 base Driver Express Power 5 Window Switch if equipped Passenger Door Lock Switch 26 base 27 10 Airbag Occupant Classifica 14 10 Amp Heater Control Cluster Red tion Module Red Sentry Key Remote Keyless 28 10 Amp Curtain Airbag if equipped Entry Red 15 20Amp Trailer Tow Brake Module if 29 5 Amp Antilock Brakes Module Yellow equipped Orange Cluster Front Control Module 16 E FCM Powertrain Control 7 Module PCM Sentry Key T ud Remote Keyless Entry Stop Yellow Lights 18 neglcctapIspower 30
196. g capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your ve
197. g has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system Once the alarm is set and the liftgate button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed on a non power liftgate vehicle you have a 30 second one time access into the liftgate area If the liftgate is not opened within 30 seconds the liftgate will automatically re lock within 10 seconds The system remains armed during liftgate entry press ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system if someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the doors can not be unlocked from the interior power door lock switches The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system The alarm system will be activated when the battery is connected if the system was previously armed The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle
198. g the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be dis played Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or lef
199. gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Transmission CAUTION Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted require adjustment under normal operating condi tions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level transmission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level CAUTION Fluid and Filter Changes Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration changed as follows in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that Normal Usage No change necessary recommended by t
200. gine idle speed NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Hazard Warning Flasher Your Engine Overheats H Jacking And Tire Changing Preparations For Jacking Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Jacking And Changing a Tire Compact Spare Tire Wheel Cover Installation If Required B Jump Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low H Driving On Slippery Surfaces 264 265 266 269 270 270 Acceleration Traction H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle H Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With Four Wheels On The Ground Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrum
201. ginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next ra
202. h Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 1576 range of tongue weight as a STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits
203. h in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel NENNEN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271 WARNING NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get engine compartment for jump starting it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic NOTE The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that transmission cannot be started this way Un i burned fuel could enter the catalytic Suid add should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry charged battery booster cables may be used to such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an obtain a start from another vehicle This type of inadvertent electrical contact start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position for both Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps
204. h pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 219 e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 220 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions
205. he manufacturer will result in Severe Usage fluid and filter Refer to Maintenance more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to the Schedule Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for correct fluid type Severe Usage is defined as Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corro
206. he vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Theft Alarm VTA Indicator Light The indicator Light flashes rapidly when the is arming and slowly when the VTA is armed See page 25 for more information 22 Tir
207. heat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 202 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance re
208. hicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 224 STARTING AND OPERATING 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 105 Occupant 2 180 165 Occupant 3 150 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200
209. hicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 247 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the charts that follow This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR
210. hrysler The following warnings will cause a text message to be displayed an audible chime to sound and the tire pres sure Telltale Light to illuminate The audible chime will occur once every ignition cycle for each warning de tected The tire pressure Telltale Light will illuminate continuously solid and will remain illuminated until the warning condition is removed reset When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 237 LEFT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT FRONT RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE One or more of these messages will be displayed in the EVIC if a low tire pressure condition exists in one or more tires Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure once the proper tire pressure has been set the TPMS warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 15 mph 24 km h CHECK TPM SYSTEM See your authorized dealer when this message appears in the EVIC This message indicates that a system fault condition has been detected CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damag
211. icator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC If Equipped 81380815 Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons de scribed in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays Personal Settings customer programmable features Compass display e Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System MENU Status Personal Settings and Telephone if Button equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept If Compass Temp Audio is already displaye
212. icle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Left Right Front Door or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Left Right Rear Door Ajar or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel 1 2 OR 3 Transmit e Channel 1 2 3 Training e Channel 1 2 OR 3 Trained Clearing Channels e Channels Cleared e Channels Defaulted e Did Not Train e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Function mode displays information on the following e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
213. ident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness STARTING AND OPERATING 257 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations n AM Boe BATTERY BACKUP LAMPS LH RIGHT STOP TURN STOP OL RH TURN STOP LEFT FEMALE TURN STOP TURN E Rd PINS DO 0 ELECTRIC m PARK GROUND BRAKES GND 812634c6 MALE PIN 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic 813262be 4 Pin Connector Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter shoul
214. ild seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars e located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back The location of the lower anchorages are identified by a symbol on the seat back You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adj
215. imi nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also pro vide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer tow ing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear display located in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage autostick simply move NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 211 the shift lever to the Right or Left D D position while in DRIVE The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen Autostick 5 7L Engines Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver with more control Autostick allows the driver to increase engine braking ability eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle perfor mance This system can also provide the driver with more co
216. ine and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve Replace the air conditioning filter X X Rotate the tires X X X M E N N C E C H D U L E 8 H 334 SCHEDULE MEN 1 Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 Ng Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired S Replace the air cleaner filter X ME Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X Il rotors f Change the rear axle fluid X Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X 5 8 NENNEN SCHEDULE 335 Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air
217. ing downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
218. interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down remove the small screw and separate the two halves of the transmit ter Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal 8135d46d Separating Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the transmitter case join the two halves of the case together Install and tighten the screw until snug Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves Test transmitter operation THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 VEHICLE THEFT ALARM This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition switch for unauthorized entry or operation When the alarm is
219. introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 379 are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
220. io will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace NOTE MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders only Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a s
221. ion EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player or Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 SALES CODE RAK AM FM CASSETTE CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE VIDEO MP3 and WMA CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 81322436 RAK Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turn
222. ipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid 296 MAINTAINING
223. irror Auto Dimmer If Equipped The driver s side outside mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged and may move either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to the vehicle This type of mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69 Power Remote Control Mirrors Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the driver s doo
224. is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Mirrors Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Heated Remote Control Mirrors It Equipped ace e ees
225. is system is automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing this button will tem porarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system Most of the time when in Automatic operation you can temporarily put the system into recirculation mode by pressing the Recirc button However under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirc button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recirculation mode you must first move your mode knob to panel panel floor or floor then hit the recirc
226. ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from slackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flatly to the cassette 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stai
227. isplayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station NOTE If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a PTY seek Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the left and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF b
228. iver to lose control of the vehicle NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TCS IF EQUIPPED WARNING TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The traction control system TCS warning light is located in the instrument cluster The TCS light will flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS system is active If the TCS warning light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions When the TCS warning light is illumi nated continuously the TCS is switched off To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by TCS press the traction control switch the TCS warning light in the instrument cluster goes out Avoid spinning one drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drive train The traction control switch is located on the center of the instrument panel To turn the
229. l times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tether Strap Mounting 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a chil
230. l vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should shift the transmission into Park remove the key from the 5 Speed Automatic Transmission ignition and apply the park brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the Park position securing the If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the Park position e When shifting into Park move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator window on the console to ensure it is in the P position Gear Selector 204 STARTING AND OPERATING Park Position The PARK position is to be used when parking the vehicle Engage only with the vehicle stopped The PARK position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always use the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever in PARK to secure the vehicle PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion NOTE Ifthe key is in the ACC or ON position you must press
231. lease the buttons until step 4 has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 The EVIC display will show Channel X Training where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 Release both buttons after the EVIC display shows Channel X Trained NOTE If the EVIC display shows Did Not Train repeat steps 2 4 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the EVIC display If the EVIC display shows Channel X Transmit where X is Channel 1 2 or 3 programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one NOTE If your hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the universal transceiver but your garage door does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 your garage 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE door opener may have a multiple security code system rolling code system Please proceed to steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most common garage door openers require this step 6 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usu
232. llow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly
233. llows the heater core to act as hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat others could be badly burned by steam or boiling from the engine cooling system coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the CAUTION hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull System Pressure Cap paragraph over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 264 WHAT DO EMERGENCIES WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Preparations Fo
234. lly retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting o
235. maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control System in Sec tion 3 of this manual for details 274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed or the drive shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
236. mended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty i This maintenance is not required if previously replaced Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts SCHEDULE 339 SCHEDULE Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X M C E C H D U L E 8 M A N N A N C C H D U L E 8 340 SCHEDULE A Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X required Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X X ro
237. n The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 5 Older Children and Child
238. n and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establish ment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of California California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NOTE For 2 7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Con trol Systems and all 6 1L engines follow Maintenance Schedule A from 0 to 102 000 miles or Schedule B from 0 to 105 000 miles e For 2 7L engines with California Certified Emission Control Systems and all 3 5L and 5 7L engines follow Maintenance Schedule A or B from 0 to 120 000 miles There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 329 Stop and go driving Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km More than 50 of your driving is at
239. n occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should onl
240. nd level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Turning the tune knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Turn the tune knob to select the following format types Program Type 16 AU DIT Dis No program type or un None News News Information Information Sports Sports Talk Talk Rock Rock Classic Rock Classic_Rock Adult Hits Adult_Hits Soft Rock Soft_Rock Top 40 Top_40 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Country Country Oldies Oldies Soft Soft Nostalgia Nostalgia Jazz Jazz Classical Classical Rhythm and Blues Rhythm and Blues Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft amp B Foreign Language Foreign Language Religious Music Religious Talk Religious Music Religious Talk Personality Personality Public Public College College Unassigned Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is d
241. nd of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are 6 possible delay wiper positions The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle located directly below the column To tilt the column move the steering wheel up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull out or push in the steering wheel Lock the steering column in position by pushing the handle in until it fully engages Tilt Steering Column Control WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the dr
242. ndomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No funct
243. ndow NOTE Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored e Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely then hold the switch for a second Push the window switch firmly down to second detent to open the window automatically until the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
244. ned clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls Manual Air Conditioning The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The instrument panel features four dual vane airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow 81350206 Ma
245. nel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable con tent can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the prog
246. ng Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or microfiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders Perform the following steps to clean the center console cup holders e Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder firmly and lift upward to remove e Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour e After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean
247. ngine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle
248. nning smoothly Do not overspeed en gine engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 A d periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal If Engine Fails to Start x If the engine fails to start after you have followed the held go Mic loor We NORMAL ST NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded Should be repeated 198 STARTING AND OPERATING TRANSMISSION SHIFTING 4 Speed Automatic Transmission After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution Gear Selector Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P o
249. ns SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the 5 designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prio
250. ntrol during passing city driving mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position the lever can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a specific gear Move the shift lever to the Left to trigger a downshift and to the Right to trigger an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmis sion gear display located in the instrument cluster NOTE In the autostick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when Left or Right D D is manually selected by the driver Shifting into or out of the autostick mode can be done at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When the driver wishes to engage autostick simply move the shift lever to the Left or Right D D position while in DRIVE Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to disengage autostick The transmission will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when autostick is engaged e The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while autostick is
251. nual Temperature Controls Press this button to turn on and off the air condi tioning Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the mode selector Press the button a second time to turn off the air conditioning The button includes an LED that illuminates when compressor op eration is selected Electric Rear Window Defroster Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is ON The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of opera tion CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Blower Control The rotary knob on the left controls the e blower and can be set in one of four speeds and OFF The blower fan mo tor will remain on until the system is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned oum O 81241942 Temperature Control The temperature of air can be selected by rotating the temperature control knob in the center The coldest tem perature setting is on the extreme left and the warmest setting on the ex treme right of the rotation The knob can be positioned at any point
252. numbers if so equipped or satellite radio brass the FUNCTION SET ECT button to change the side Button channels if so equipped of the tape being played The following describes the operation of the SCROLL Player Operation button in each mode Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the Radio Operation next track on the CD Press the bottom of the SCROLL Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the button once to either listen to the beginning of the current next listenable station up from the current setting Press or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next it is within one second after the current track begins to listenable station down from the current setting play 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button twice to listen to the second track on the CD three times to listen to the third track and so forth Satellite Radio Operation Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin
253. o be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights On Lock Unlock NOTE The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be turned on or off On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Set tings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 2 Continue to hold the UNLOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Test the flash lights with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful
254. o od dehet eere entend tes 143 Trip Functions 144 Compass Display 146 Telephone If Equipped 148 Navigation If Equipped 149 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features ll Radio General Information 153 Radio Broadcast 153 Two Types Of Signals 153 Electrical 153 AM Reception FM Reception 153 ll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability 154 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD Mode 158 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 159 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 160 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio It Equipped iecit Rey 160 Sales Code RAK AM FM Cassette CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone Video MP3 And WMA Capabilities 161 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 161 Operating Instructions Tape Player 164 Seek Button zones ausu RES 165 F
255. od is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light OFF The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
256. of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Light 562 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity 12 6220 Glove Box 194 Door Courtesy eR RR RR 562 Shift Indicator Light JKLE14140 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for re placement instructions of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam 9006 High Beam 9005 Front Park Turn 3157NAK Front Fog Light If Equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Dealer Front Sidemarker 194 Serviced at Dealer Tail Stop 3057 Tail Turn Light 222255505020 3057 Rear 168 Backup Light a ce Romer 921 Center High Mount Stop
257. ol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Feder
258. omatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the interval
259. on NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Lock the doors by pushing down on the door lock plunger on each door trim panel For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to o
260. on number of English Espanol Prompts or Francais on off phone to Say 4 digit System Lists select pin code Phones Say Priority number of List Phones phone to delete Start Pairing procedure on phone New phone System System Lists temporarily override Assign Priority of phone 1 to 7 1 having highest priority phone priorities All Phones Deleted Pairing Complete Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81525401 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE North American English SEATS Primary Alternate s Power Seats Zero Oh The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat Add location Add new near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat All All of them up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts passenger s seat will move up or down forward or Delete a name Delete i Language Select language List names List all List paired phones List phones Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select Set up Phone settings phone set up Power Seat Switch NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be inj
261. on as the ESP To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the ESP system by pressing the ESP switch ESP Control Switch With the ESP system switched off the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable ESP al ways operates under braking even with the switch in the OFF position When the ESP system is disabled if one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin the brake is applied by the ESP system to control wheel slip This ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately 24 mph 40 km h and 50 mph 80 km h CAUTION If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off key in the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK or ACC position Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes Synchronizing ESP The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with BAS If the power supply was interrupted battery disconnected or dis charged the ESP BAS malfunction indicator light may be illuminated with the engine running Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS malfunction indicator light should go out ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at
262. on the 812d193c dial Mode Selection sj The mode selector the right rotary i knob can be placed in several posi tions Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the occupants to fine tune sido Airflow distribution Defrost 5 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary Defrost Floor Pe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets x and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Floor 9 Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Bi Level Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instru 4 ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Recirculation
263. ook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please remem ber the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the follo
264. oor airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 6 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual WARNING Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows If Equipped Side Remote Acceleration Sensors If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner
265. ot use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved DaimlerChrysler Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller detects moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the
266. ough the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Delay Power Off to Acces sories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 44 RW FF 44 SEEK p gt 0 wx gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 RND AUX 2 0 2 c 2 SET 815eb156 REF Radio NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will
267. pe Button ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 181 s Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 181 IPHONE AM Me H Climate Controls PTY Button 175 Climate Controls Manual Satellite 175 Automatic Temperature Control Reception Quality 175 H Equipped 1L ette ond e ans 184 Wi Video Entertainment System Summer Operation 189 PRES GOAS ARM Winter Operation 190 22 ma i NT 177 Vacation Storage 190 Clock Setting 178 ds ll Remote Sound System Controls 178 159 Radio Operation 179 TEENS a Tape Player Operation 179 POSTS E nt CD Player Operation 179 132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1 2 3 14 1 5 6 1 18 1716 15 14 12 2 11 1 Air Outlet 7 Glove Box 13 Ignition Switch 2 Trip Odometer Button 8 Radio 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center 3 Instrument Cluster 9 Climate Controls 15 Hood Release 4 Hazard Switch 10 Heated Seat Switch 16 Parking Brake Release Lever 5 Passenger Air Bag Off Light 11 Power Outlet 17 Trunk Release Switch 6 Electronic Stability Program Off
268. pect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of th
269. ped This light shows the front fog lights are ON See page 103 for more information 16 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system volt age The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable how ever see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or en gine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn for 5 to 8 seconds as bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s or front p
270. pedal when you need to slow down or stop NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 215 WARNING Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 553 The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both th
271. per Blades 296 Windshield Wipers 104 Wiper Blade Replacement 296 Wipers Intermittent 105 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
272. perate A chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC position and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met The Auto Lock feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed 1 2 3 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC section of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position Power Door Lock Switch 4 single chime will indicate the completion of the Ignition Key Position programming Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors Auto Unlock 80e54ed7 The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 2 The transmission
273. perations at this point The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an in
274. phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the driver and the front passenger The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains a penholder a tissue holder and a tire gauge holder In addition to the internal storage the console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control result ing in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or imprope
275. ployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 e Seatbelt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Cruise control status Traction stability control status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always che
276. protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see section on Child Restraint should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See the section on Child Restraint NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 2 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 3 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 4 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 5 If your vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags do not lean against the d
277. quipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 and 12 Satellite if equipped stations 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the be
278. quired NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293 NOTE The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Batt Locati after handling 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION WARNING It is essential when replacing the cables on the Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a
279. r Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Panel 2 Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Air flows through the regis ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Depress this button to turn on and off the air conditioning during manual operation only Con ditioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate when UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 the rear window defroster is ON The defroster automati cally turns off after approximately 10 minutes of opera tion for the first push of the button and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water This button can be used to block out
280. r Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until or OFF ap pears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected
281. r Jacking e Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or Hazard Flasher Switch slippery areas set the parking brake and place the Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition vehicle is being jacked e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NENNEN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Remove the fastener securing the spare tire The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack e Open the trunk e Lift the access cover using the pull strap os 6 812 5587 Spare Tire Fastener Remove the spare tire 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel 266 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES M Remove the fastener securing the jack 3 Before raising the vehicle use lug wrench to carefully pry off wheel center cap Jack Fastener 8133d194 Jacking and Changing a Tire Center Cap Removal 1 Block the wheel diagonally WARNING opposite the flat tire Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
282. r R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears STARTING AND OPERATING 199 WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Gear Ranges P Park P Park supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the gear selector in the P Park position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P Park other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all
283. r These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Defrost After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 3 direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the position mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Power Mirror Controls Illuminated Vanity Mirror 70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfe
284. r calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g H
285. r open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable through the EVIC Refer to Delay Power Off to Acces sories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash r
286. r to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN lt OF VEHICLE uo ES 1o 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 7L Engines Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800d ab6 an octane of 87 3 5L and 5 7L Engines The 3 5L and 5 7L engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and perfor mance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasoline or mid grade gasoline and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING 2 METHOD STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Spark Knock Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of
287. r without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or assistance 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driverinteractive display which includes HomeLink system messages The EVIC is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer 5 E de 40 og MPH 1202 2 K 81380815 Electronic Vehicle Information 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels Cleared after 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 8125e19b HomeLink Buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans mitter buttons Do not re
288. ram type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes mm e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna cause signal blockage 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the center console storage bin under the armrest lid Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Raising The DVD Screen Accessing The VES eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Remote Control Location NAVIGATION SYSTEM SALES CODE REC IF EQUIPPED NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right sid
289. regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline 242 STARTING AND OPERATING Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methan
290. rking knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call Toll Free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at www techauthority daimlerchrysler com www daimlerchrysler ca manuals NENNEN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 349 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car Pa
291. rly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instruments And 5 132 Standard Instrument Cluster 133 B Premium Instrument Cluster 134 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 135 Bi Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped 142 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays
292. rompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after succes
293. ronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to select You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is
294. rved or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 2 7L 3 5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285 the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart 9L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range
295. s Occupant Classification System OCS for the Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will not detect roll over e The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e Also the ORC turns on the airbag warning light and PAD indicator light in the instru N ment panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the airbag warning light will turn off The NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 PAD indicator light will function normally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction
296. s 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Du Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty m trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle See your authorized dealer for a trailer hitch engineered specifically for your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt Wt 2 7L Automatic 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 2 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg meters gage 1 000 lbs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 3 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg meters gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 4 persons amp Lug 100 Ibs 45 kg meters gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 22 SQ FT 2 04 square Up to 5 persons amp NO 100 Ibs 45 kg meters Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 3 5L amp 5 7L Automatic 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 2 persons amp Lug 200 Ibs 91 kg meters gage 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 3 persons amp Lug 200 Ibs 91 kg meters gage 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 4 persons amp Lug 150 Ibs 68 kg meters gage 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 32 SQ FT 2 97 square Up to 5 persons amp NO 100 Ibs 45 kg meters Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg
297. s continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Cassette Satellite or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remained tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button and will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds satellite scan 8 seconds at each listenable station before continu ing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right sid
298. s properly tightened If the gas cap is not secured properly the Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 of this manual for more information WARNING Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the ve
299. s shown on Schedule B NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your local dealer for service Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to over
300. s work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC see Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must oc
301. safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures NENNEN STARTING AND OPERATING 229 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident 1 ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to fo
302. sfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different elect
303. sh with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb See page 103 for more information 8 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an autho rized dealer as soon as possible See page 50 for more information 9 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light illuminates and will be accompanied AM by a single chime to warn of an overheated engine condition The engine temperature is critically hot and the vehicle should be turned off immediately The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator LightlIraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped See page 109 for more information 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist Sys
304. sher 7 20 Amp Fog Lights Pink Yellow 19 50 Amp Radiator Fan 8 15 Lights License Park Side Red Blue Marker Stop Turn 20 20 Amp Starter 9 15 Amp Front Control Module FCM Blue Blue 21 50 Amp Antilock Brakes System ABS 10 5 Amp Powertrain Control Module Red Pump Motor Orange PCM Starter 22 40 Amp AC Clutch Radiator Fan High 11 20 Amp Auto Shutdown Powertrain Green Low Yellow Control Module PCM 23 12 24 13 25 30 Amp Front Control Module FCM 14 25 Amp Powertrain Control Module Pink Clear PCM 26 20 Amp Transmission RLE 15 25 Amp Injectors Ignition Coils Blue Clear 27 30 Amp Front Control Module FCM Pink MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the rear compartment under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 812da393 Rear Power Distribution Center m 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Cavity Fuse Circuits 3 e When installing the Power Distribution Center 4 40 Amp Battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Green erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 5 30 Amp Heated Seats if equipped may allow water to get into the Power Distribu Pink tion Center and possibly result in a electrical 6 20Amp Fuel Pump system failure Yellow When replacin
305. sion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint and to protect your paint finish Take care never to touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is scratch the paint considered the responsibility of the owner e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint similar cause which destroys the paint and protective finish coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil CAUTION ity of the owner e wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials chrome plated wheels should
306. ss the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 81346b2c Front Airbag Components This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less
307. ssed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Selecting Satellite Mode and Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each chan
308. ssenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to d
309. ssure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual e J TURN SIGNALS REAR WINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERMITTENT 2 mN 2 1 FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER 2 FUEL FILL SIDE WINDSHIELD WASHER REAR WINDOW FLUID LEVEL ENGINE OIL WINDSHIELD REAR WINDOW ELECTRIC
310. steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while down shifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac tices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically 202 STARTING AND OPERATING at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 64 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out
311. sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice Off road or desert operation NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M E N N C E C H D U L E 8 330 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully operation warmed engine
312. system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301 Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based e
313. t It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best NENNEN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds
314. t likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre uency kHz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 and WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to star
315. t playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next file Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play LOADJ EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player NENNEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
316. t system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe WARNING Cooling System Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon WARNING monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature manual controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for
317. t to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will be displayed Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if e
318. tay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light When the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly See page 282 for more information Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Ind
319. te the system open the rear door and move the child lock control located near the door s rear latch to the ON position Child Lock Control When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter buttons for all keys 815afata Keyless Entry Transmitter To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowl edge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system also turns on The headlights will also activate and remain on for 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
320. tem BAS Warning Light If Equipped The yellow ESP BAS warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays ESP BAS UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 111 for more information 12 Oil Pressure Warning Light 9271 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in section 7 See page 285 for more information 13 High Beam Light This light shows that the headlights on high beam Push the Multi Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 14 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 15 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equip
321. ternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Front Seat Cup Holders Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Seat Cup Holders Premium Rear Seat Cup Holders The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest center console between the rear seats The cup holders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup holders Close the cover when the cup holders are no longer needed F Hol HP HUI e Rear Seat Cup Holders NENNEN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 STORAGE Console Features The center console contains a large storage bin The storage bin contains a four slot coin holder designed to hold various size coins and a rubber mat at the bottom of the bin for noise control The bin is large enough to hold a portable AC DC converter to power laptops games or other electrical equipment Two slots at the top right side of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell
322. that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes 348 Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete wo
323. torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioner
324. tors Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt X and tensioner Replace if required Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months X if not done at 102 000 miles Check and replace if necessary the PCV X valve Replace the air conditioning filter X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X X NENNEN SCHEDULE A 341 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X quired Replace the air cleaner filter X Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors X Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten X sioner Replace if required Replace the spark plugs 2 7L 3 5L Engines X Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine X Check and replace if necessary the PCV valve X Replace the engine timing belt 3 5L Engine X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102 000 X miles if not done at 60 months Replace the air conditioning filter X X Rotate the tires X X X X X M E N A N C E C H D U L E 8 M A N N A N C C H D U L E 8 342 SCHEDULE A Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilomet
325. towing Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vices e Off road or desert operation If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M E N N C E C H D U L E 8 332 SCHEDULE M Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 Kilometers 5 000 10000 15 000 20000 25 000 30 000 Ng Change engine and engine filter if not X X X X X X replaced at 3 months Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re X X X X X quired S Replace the air cleaner filter X ME Inspect the front and rear brake linings and X Il rotors Replace the air conditioning filter X Rotate the tires X X X 5 8 SCHEDULE 333 Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000 Kilometers 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 60 000 Change eng
326. traction control system OFF press the traction control switch until the traction control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights up 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel switch off the TCS system by pressing the traction control switch Traction Control Switch To turn the system back ON press the traction control switch a second time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF NOTE The traction control system comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur even if you used the button to turn the system OFF The Traction Control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM BAS IF EQUIPPED BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with electronic stability program ESP The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency brak ing maneuvers The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver s braking style This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the antilock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply con tinuous braking power during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure NE
327. ts or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the Multi Function Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 NOTE The message Turn Signal On will appear in the electronic vehicle information center EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will be heard when the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi Function Lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
328. tton until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Drive
329. ture Maintaining Your Airbag System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with WARNING power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped Modifications to any part of the airbag system could moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the you Do not modify the components or wiring key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is including adding any kind of badges or stickers to driven the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or frame You need proper knee impact protection in a colli sion Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equip ment on or behind the knee impact bolster Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classifi cation System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags 50 TH
330. u tions per minute limit would be exceeded Briefly press the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the selector lever in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear D WARNING On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehi cle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK P REVERSE R and NEUTRAL N will continue to operate SECOND gear will operate in the DRIV
331. uipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 The window lock switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen ger windows will be disabled WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on th
332. ull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels NENNEN WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 273 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
333. ured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Reclining Seats The recliner control for both front seats is located on the outboard side of the seat Power Seat Recline Switch WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Control Lever Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats which are available only with leather upholstery provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The front driver s and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illumi nated for high one for low and none
334. usting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where pos sible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and route the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child eee THINGS TO KNOW
335. utton up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will reverse until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Tape Eject Press this button and the cassette will disen a gage and eject from the radio TAPE Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press Preset 6 The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch are turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be
336. ver leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatica
337. wing vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connecte
338. y be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Manual manual manualslib manual car manuale digitale manually meaning manual timesheet manual transmission manual wheelchair manually update your device drivers windows manual arts high school manual for courts martial manual definition manual labor manual lawn mower manual muscle testing manually register devices with autopilot manual muscle testing grades manualidades manual transfer switch manual therapy cpt code manual blood pressure cuff manual transmission cars for sale manual handling manual digital manual autopilot enrollment

Related Contents

B.RO T12W  Chargeuse BF110..166    MXL USER MANUAL - Allmotorservice    Samsung S19A350B 用户手册  Standard Box IPC Installation Guide  おばあちゃん、気持ちええ おばあちゃん、気持ちええ？  IPL T Series Interface  誤使用・不注意な使い方防止のために  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file